FCC ID: N7N-MC5725-H EVDO Mini-PCI Express Card CDMA Modem Module

HP Notebook PC Getting Started Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-

Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2007 Document Part Number: 443826-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. iii iv Product notice Table of contents 1 First-time setup Identifying hardware for setup ................................................................. 1 Setting up the computer .......................................................................... 2 Step 1: Insert the battery ......................................................... 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power ....................... 4 Step 3: Open the computer ..................................................... 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer .................................................. 6 Step 5: Set up the software ..................................................... 6 Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) ........................... 7 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware ......................................................................... 9 Top components .................................................................... 9 Lights ................................................................... 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices ................. 10 Display components ............................................ 11 Keys .................................................................. 12 Front components ................................................................ 13 Rear components ................................................................. 14 Right-side components .......................................................... 15 Left-side components ............................................................ 16 Bottom components .............................................................. 17 Wireless antennae ............................................................... 18 3 Finding information Finding Help and Support ..................................................................... 19 Finding the user guides ......................................................................... 19 Identifying installed software and hardware ............................................ 20 4 Next steps Protecting the computer ......................................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from viruses ...................................... 21 Protecting your system files ................................................... 21 Protecting your privacy ......................................................... 21 Protecting the computer from power surges ............................. 22 Using the computer safely ..................................................... 22 Connecting to a computer network ......................................................... 24 Installing additional hardware and software ............................................ 25 Installing hardware .............................................................. 25 Locating and installing software ............................................. 25 Updating the software installed on the computer ...................................... 26 Turning off the computer ....................................................................... 26 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources ..................................................................... 27 v Quick troubleshooting ........................................................................... 28 The computer is unable to start up ......................................... 28 The computer screen is blank ................................................ 29 Software is functioning abnormally ........................................ 29 The computer is turned on but not responding ......................... 30 The computer is unusually warm ............................................ 31 An external device is not working .......................................... 31 The wireless network connection is not working ....................... 32 Contacting technical support ................................................................. 33 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ........................................................................ 35 Backing up your information .................................................................. 36 When to back up ................................................................ 36 Backup suggestions ............................................................. 37 Backing up specific files or folders ......................................... 38 Backing up the entire hard drive ............................................ 38 Creating recovery points ...................................................... 39 Scheduling backups ............................................................. 39 Performing a recovery ........................................................................... 40 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs ......................... 40 Performing a recovery from the hard drive .............................. 40 Initiating a recovery in Windows .......................... 40 Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition ............................................................. 41 Appendix B Operating environment and input power Operating environment ......................................................................... 43 Input power ......................................................................................... 44 Appendix C Routine care Cleaning the display ............................................................................ 45 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................... 45 Traveling and shipping ......................................................................... 45 Index .................................................................................................... 47 vi First-time setup 1 Identifying hardware for setup To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. NOTE: Components included with the computer may vary by region or country and by model. Component

(1)

(2) Power cord AC adapter Component

(3)

(4) Primary battery Modem cable (select models only) NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. NOTE: A modem cable is required only for dial-up networking. Identifying hardware for setup 1 Setting up the computer CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. 2. Connecting the computer to external power Inserting the battery into the computer The battery begins to charge. NOTE:

3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) NOTE: Refer to Appendix A, "Backup and recovery," for instructions. 2 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Align the tabs (1) on the battery with the notches on the battery bay. 3. Press the battery (2) into the battery bay until the battery clicks into place. Setting up the computer 3 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power NOTE: Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. NOTE: A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but the battery charge display will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. 4 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 3: Open the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch (1) to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display (2). Setting up the computer 5 Step 4: Turn on the computer To turn on the computer:

Slide the power switch to the right (1). The power light (2) turns on. Step 5: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. If you are prompted to select an operating system language, CAUTION:

choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software NOTE:

setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. 6 Chapter 1 First-time setup Step 6: Create recovery discs (recommended) You can use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs containing your full factory image. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix A, Backup and Recovery, for detailed instructions. Setting up the computer 7 8 Chapter 1 First-time setup 2 Quick tour Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Top components Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Power light Battery light Drive light Caps lock light Component

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Num lock light Identifying the hardware 9 Buttons, switches, and pointing devices Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Pointing stick Presentation button Volume mute button

(5)

(6)

(7) Volume scroll zone Right pointing stick button Left pointing stick button 10 Chapter 2 Quick tour Display components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Integrated camera (select models only) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch (select models only) Keyboard light Keyboard light button

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) HP Fingerprint Sensor (fingerprint reader) Internal microphones (2) Convertible hinge Ambient light sensor Identifying the hardware 11 Keys Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) esc key fn key Windows logo key

(4)

(5)

(6) Windows applications key Embedded numeric keypad keys Function keys 12 Chapter 2 Quick tour Front components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Camera light (select models only) Camera mode switch Keyboard light button External WWAN antenna button

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) External WWAN antenna Power switch Display release latch Bluetooth compartment Identifying the hardware 13 Rear components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Windows security button*

RJ-11 (modem) jack RJ-45 (network) jack

(4)

(5) External monitor port Power connector

*This button is used to enter the ctrl+alt+delete command. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl

+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. 14 Chapter 2 Quick tour Right-side components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Fingerprint reader 1394 port Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack

(5)

(6)

(7) Media Card Reader USB port Security cable slot Identifying the hardware 15 Left-side components NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent ExpressCard slot (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Pen slot Vent Smart card reader (select models only) Wireless light

(5)

(6)

(7) Wireless switch Info button Powered USB port 16 Chapter 2 Quick tour Bottom components Component Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Battery bay Speaker SIM slot Vents (2)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Docking connector Charge level indicator Battery release latch Accessory battery connector Hard drive compartment

(10) Accessory battery connector door Identifying the hardware 17 Wireless antennae On select computer models, wireless antennae send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. Component Component

(1)

(2) WWAN antenna*

WLAN antennae (2)*

(3) External WWAN antenna

*Antennae (1) and (2) are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the NOTE:

antennae free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 18 Chapter 2 Quick tour Finding information 3 Finding Help and Support NOTE: Help and Support is preinstalled on the computer. Access to Help and Support does not require an Internet connection. You can access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. In addition to providing information about the Windows operating system, Help and Support includes these topics:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications How to help safeguard the computer How to get the best performance from the battery How to set up a wireless network Links to community forums of IT experts Finding the user guides User guides and regulatory and safety information are provided on the computer and are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. NOTE: User guides for select models may also be provided on a User Guides disc. Finding Help and Support 19 Identifying installed software and hardware To see a list of the software that is preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

Select Start > All Programs. NOTE: Double-click the name of a program if you want to open it. For details about using software included with the computer, refer NOTE:

to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. You can also use Device Manager to add hardware or modify device configurations. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help for more information. In the left pane, click Device Manager. 20 Chapter 3 Finding information 4 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how to protect the computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. To access Norton Internet Security or get more information about it, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Protecting your system files The operating system and the backup and recovery software provide several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. For additional information, refer to Appendix A, Backup and recovery. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. Protecting the computer 21 To optimize the computers privacy protection features, follow these guidelines:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are commonly available from computer or electronics retailers in many regions. Using the computer safely To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your WARNING!

equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 22 Chapter 4 Next steps To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort WARNING!

Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this document, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or WARNING!

battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or refer to the User Guides disc included with some models. Protecting the computer 23 Connecting to a computer network Bluetooth Local area network (LAN) The computer has the following networking capabilities:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. NOTE:

wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with the computer. You can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a 24 Chapter 4 Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Installing hardware To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software Software on the computer is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled software. To see a list of ready-to-use programs or to start a program, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs. A list of programs is displayed. 2. Click the name of a program to start the program. Preloaded software. This software cannot be used until it is installed. To locate and install a preloaded program or driver, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Software Setup. A list of programs and drivers is displayed. 2. Click the program or driver you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Software on disc. To install software from a disc, follow these steps:

1. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen Insert the disc into your optical drive. instructions. NOTE: Restart the computer if you are prompted to do so. For details about using the software provided with the computer, NOTE:

refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, in the software Help, or on the manufacturers Web site. Installing additional hardware and software 25 Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software installed on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access links for updating installed software, refer to Help and Support. Turning off the computer Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 26 Chapter 4 Next steps 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Access Web site links and additional information about the computer Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools, like Help and Support, can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. For further assistance, connect to the Internet and contact technical support by selecting Start > Help and Support > Contact support. Troubleshooting resources 27 Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you slide the power switch, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with this computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided, until startup occurs:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 28 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank but you have not turned off the computer, one or more of these settings may be the cause:

The computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly slide the power switch to the right. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. The computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external displays, and simultaneous display on all devices. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 4. Quick troubleshooting 29 The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these steps, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 30 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting The computer is unusually warm To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING!

overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE:

components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during operation. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal An external device is not working If an external device does not function as expected, confirm these settings:

The device is turned on as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with the operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, refer to Help and Support. Quick troubleshooting 31 The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

NOTE:

administrator. If you are connecting to a corporate network, contact the IT Be sure that the wireless device is turned on and the wireless light on the computer is blue. If the light is amber, press the wireless switch to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. NOTE:

information and the Web site links in Help and Support. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the 32 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to start a chat session with a support specialist or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). Contacting technical support 33 34 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting A Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R discs (purchased separately). NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVD+RW, and DVD-RW discs, are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of the recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. Creating recovery discs 35 Backing up your information NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software 36 Appendix A Backup and recovery Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

a. b. Display the screen. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. NOTE: Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. NOTE: Drivers, utilities, and programs installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Backing up your information 37 Backing up specific files or folders This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). NOTE:

the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Back up user created files and folders, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. NOTE: A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. NOTE:

amount of data being stored. To back up your entire hard drive:

1. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. 38 Appendix A Backup and recovery Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE:

created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make copies of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE: Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup &

Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Backing up your information 39 Performing a recovery NOTE: You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup

& Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up all personal files. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery > Backup & Recovery Manager. Click Next. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. 4. 5. 40 Appendix A Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. Follow the on-screen instructions. Back up all personal files. Performing a recovery 41 42 Appendix A Backup and recovery B Operating environment and input power Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating

-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 32F to 95F 41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Operating environment 43 Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 19 V dc @ 4.7 A - 90 W 4.74 A 44 Appendix B Operating environment and input power C Routine care Cleaning the display To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning CAUTION:

fluids, or chemicals on the display. To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the keyboard To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not WARNING!

use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Traveling and shipping The computer is built to go with you for work and play. For best results, follow the traveling and shipping tips described here. To prepare the computer for traveling and shipping, follow these steps:

1. 2. Back up your information. Remove all optical discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards and ExpressCards. CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove discs from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. 3. 4. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with Shut down the computer. the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Cleaning the display 45 If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, place it in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, note that the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Contact technical support to discuss power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING!

equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the 46 Appendix C Routine care Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 15 A AC adapter connecting 4 identifying 1 accessory battery connector, identifying 17 altitude specifications 43 ambient light sensor, identifying 11 antennae external WWAN 13, 18 WLAN 18 WWAN 18 antivirus software 21 applications key, Windows 12 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 15 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 15 B backup files and folders 38 hard drive 38 modifications made to system 39 scheduling 39 battery charging 4 identifying 1 inserting 3 battery bay, identifying 17 battery light behavior 4 identifying 9 battery release latch, identifying 17 bay, battery 17 blank screen, troubleshooting 29 Bluetooth 24 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 13 buttons external WWAN antenna 13 info 16 keyboard light 11, 13 pointing stick 10 presentation 10 volume mute 10 Windows security 14 C cables and cords modem 1 power 1, 4, 46 camera light, identifying 11, 13 camera mode switch, identifying 11, 13 camera, identifying 11 caps lock light, identifying 9 charge level indicator, identifying 17 cleaning the display 45 cleaning the keyboard 45 compartments hard drive 17 memory module 17 wireless devices 17 components bottom 17 display 11 front 13 left-side 16 rear 14 right-side 15 top 9 wireless antennae 18 computer turning off 26 turning on 6, 28 computer viruses 21 connecting the computer to external power 4 connecting to a computer network 24 connectors accessory battery 17 docking 17 power 4, 14 convertible hinge, identifying 11 cord, power 46 creating recovery points 39 customer support Help and Support 19 user guides 19 D devices, external, troubleshooting 31 display cleaning 45 switching image 29 display release latch, identifying 13 Index 47 display switch, identifying 10 docking connector, identifying 17 documentation 19 drive light, identifying 9 E electric shock 22 emergency shutdown procedures 26, 30 entire hard drive backup 38 environmental specifications 43 esc key, identifying 12 ExpressCard slot, identifying 16 external devices, troubleshooting 31 external monitor port, identifying 14 external WWAN antenna button, identifying 13 external WWAN antenna, identifying 13, 18 F fingerprint reader, identifying 11, 15 firewalls 22 fn key, identifying 12 function keys, identifying 12 H hard drive backup 38 hard drive compartment, identifying 17 hard drive recovery 40 hardware identifying 20 installing 25 needed for setup 1 headphone (audio-out) jack 15 Help and Support 19 Hibernation 29 hinge, convertible, identifying 11 humidity specifications 43 I IEC 60950 compliance 23, 31 IEEE 1394 port, identifying 15 image, switching, among display devices 29 info button, identifying 16 input power specifications 44 inserting the battery 3 internal display switch, identifying 10 internal microphones, identifying 11 48 Index J jacks audio-in (microphone) 15 audio-out (headphone) 15 RJ-11 (modem) 14 RJ-45 (network 14 K keyboard light button, identifying 11, 13 keyboard light, identifying 11 keyboard, cleaning 45 keypad keys, identifying 12 keys esc 12 fn 12 function 12 keypad 12 Windows applications 12 Windows logo 12 L labels, service tag 33 LAN (local area network) 24 latch, battery release 17 latch, display release, identifying 13 lights battery 4, 9 camera 11, 13 caps lock 9 drive 9 keyboard 11 mute 9 num lock 9 power 6, 9 volume down 9 volume mute 9 volume up 9 wireless 16 M Media Card Reader, identifying 15 memory module compartment 17 microphone (audio-in) jack 15 microphones, internal, identifying 11 modem cable 1 modem, surge protection 22 monitor port, external 14 monitor, external 29 mute button, identifying 10 mute light, identifying 9 N network, connecting computer to 24 Norton Internet Security 21 num lock light, identifying 9 O operating environment specifications 43 operating system version number 33 overheating, computer 31 P pen slot, identifying 16 pointing stick buttons, identifying 10 pointing stick, identifying 10 ports 1394 15 external monitor 14 USB 15, 16 posture 23 power connector identifying 14 using 4 power cord connecting 4 identifying 1 power light behavior 6 identifying 9 power options 29 power specifications 44 power surges 22 power switch identifying 13 using 6 presentation button, identifying 10 privacy, protecting 21 Product Id 33 R reader, fingerprint, identifying 11, 15 recovery discs creating 7, 35 using 40 recovery partition 41 recovery points 39 registration number, operating system 33 regulatory information notices 23 release latch, battery 17 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 14 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 14 S safe computing practices 22 Safety & Comfort Guide 23 scheduling backups 39 security cable slot, identifying 15 serial number 33 service tag 33 setup, computer 1 shipping the computer 45 shutdown procedures 26 SIM slot, identifying 17 Sleep 29 slots ExpressCard 16 Media Card Reader 15 pen 16 security cable 15 SIM 17 Smart card reader, identifying 16 software antivirus 21 identifying 20 installing 25 setup 6 troubleshooting 29 updating 26 speaker, identifying 17 specifications altitude 43 input power 44 operating environment 43 startup problems, troubleshooting 28 surge protection 22 switches camera mode 11, 13 power 6, 13 wireless 16 system backup 38 system recovery points 39 T technical support 33 temperature safety considerations 23, 31 specifications 43 troubleshooting 31 Index 49 traveling with the computer 43, 45 troubleshooting blank screen 29 display problems 29 external device problems 31 overheating problems 31 resources 27 software problems 29 startup problems 28 unresponsive computer 30 wireless network problems 32 turning off the computer 26 turning on the computer 6, 28 U unresponsive computer, troubleshooting 30 USB ports, identifying 15, 16 user guides 19 V vents identifying 16, 17 overheating 31 precautions 23, 31 viruses 21 volume down light, identifying 9 volume mute button, identifying 10 volume mute light, identifying 9 volume scroll zone, identifying 10 volume up light, identifying 9 W Windows applications key, identifying 12 Windows logo key, identifying 12 Windows security button, identifying 14 wireless device compartment 17 wireless light, identifying 16 wireless network problems, troubleshooting 32 wireless switch, identifying 16 WLAN (wireless local area network) 24 WLAN antenna, identifying 18 work habits 23 workstation setup 23 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 24 WWAN antenna, identifying 18 50 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition: June 2007 First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-005 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................... 2 Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ........................................................................................................................ 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules ......................... 3 Brazilian notice ........................................................................................................................ 4 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 4 Canadian notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ......................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ............................................................................................................ 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................ 6 France ...................................................................................................... 6 Italy .......................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................... 6 Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules ............................................................ 7 Ergonomics notice ..................................................................................................... 7 Germany .................................................................................................. 7 Indian notice ........................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ...................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 8 Bluetooth devices .................................................................................................... 10 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ................................................................ 10 Korean notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Singaporean wireless notice .................................................................................................... 11 Taiwan notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................ 11 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ..................................................................................................... 12 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ...................................................................................................................... 13 Telecommunications device approvals ....................................................................... 13 U.S. modem statements ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem declarations ......................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements .................................................................................... 21 Japanese modem statements ..................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements .............................................................................. 22 Voice support .......................................................................................... 22 Power cord notice .................................................................................................................. 23 Japanese power cord notice ..................................................................................... 23 Macrovision Corporation notice ............................................................................................... 23 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice ........................................................................................... 24 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ............................................................................... 24 Power cord notices ................................................................................................................. 25 Travel notice .......................................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner .................................. 25 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal ..................................................................................................................... 26 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ................................................................................ 26 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 26 Chinese material content declarations ....................................................................................... 27 Japanese material content declaration ...................................................................................... 29 United States mercury disposal ................................................................................................ 29 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ...................................................................... 29 Index ................................................................................................................................. 30 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device may not cause harmful interference. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-

GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Italy L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz

(Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Broadband Wireless Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The SAR information for your computer, including the recommended minimum distance from the body, is available on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennae are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/

kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG has the certification mark below:

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENWW Korean notice 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENERGY STAR compliance Computers bearing the ENERGY STAR logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for Notebook computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING!

always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/

laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ENWW Power cord notice 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING!

To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Battery notices To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery; short WARNING!

the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notices WARNING!

To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Travel notice WARNING!

power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION:

distribution system. To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable ENWW Power cord notices 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalen t Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel X X X X X X X X X X X Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking decice Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB flash memory driveUSB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation "Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment."

NOTE:

conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. ENWW Japanese material content declaration 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 11 B battery disposal notice 26 battery notice 11, 24 Brazilian notice 4 C cable grounding notice 25 Canadian modem statement 21 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 27 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 26 equipment 26 mercury 29 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 26 ENERGY STAR compliance 12 environmental notices 26 equipment disposal notice 26 ergonomics notice 7 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 New Zealand 22 U.S. 14 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 7 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 29 Japanese modem statement 21 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 23 K Korean notice 11 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice 23 mercury disposal notice 29 modem notices 13 modem statements Canadian 21 Japanese 21 N New Zealand modem statement 22 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 24, 26 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 26 equipment disposal 26 ergonomics 7 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 24 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 23 Korean 11 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 23 mercury disposal 29 modem 13 perchlorate material 29 power cords 23, 25 Singaporean 11 Taiwan 11 travel 25 P power cord notice 23, 25 S Singaporean wireless notice 11 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 11 travel notice 25 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 14 V voice support 22 W wireless LAN devices 3 ENWW Index 31 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

DRAFT Revised: 11/21/05 File: Title.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Getting Started HP Compaq Notebook PC Document Part Number: 409814-001 March 2006 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Microsoft Windows. hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/21/05 File: Notice-Front.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Java is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Compaq Notebook PC First Edition March 2006 Document Part Number: 409814-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001TOC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Contents 1 First-time setup Identify hardware . 11 Computer hardware . 11 Top components . 12 Keys . 14 Pointing devices. 15 Front components . 17 Rear components . 19 Right-side components . 110 Left-side components . 111 Bottom components. 112 Set up the computer . 114 Step 1: Insert the battery pack . 115 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 116 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 118 Step 4: Set up the software . 120 Step 5: Create recovery discs. 121 2 Next steps Install additional hardware and software . 21 Protect the computer . 21 Protect the computer from viruses. 21 Protect your system files . 22 Protect your privacy. 22 Protect the computer from power surges. 23 Use the computer safely . 23 Getting Started v hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001TOC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Contents Connect to a computer network . 25 Update your software . 26 Locate the user guides . 26 Turn off the computer correctly . 27 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 31 Quick troubleshooting . 32 Is the computer unable to start up? . 32 Is the computer screen blank? . 33 Is software functioning abnormally? . 34 Is the computer turned on, but is not responding?. 35 Is the computer unusually warm? . 36 Is an external device not working? . 37 Is the home wireless network connection not working? . 38 Help and Support Center . 39 Customer Care . 310 Preparing to contact Customer Care . 310 Contacting Customer Care by e-mail or telephone . 311 A Specifications Operating Environment . A1 Rated Input Power . A2 B Backup and Recovery Safeguarding your data . B1 Backing up your system . B2 Backing up specific files or folders . B2 Backing up your entire system . B3 Backing up modifications made to your system . B4 Recovering your system. B6 Creating recovery discs . B7 Performing a recovery . B8 vi Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001TOC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Contents C Connect to the Internet from your home Choose an ISP . C1 Using the New Connection Wizard . C2 Choose the type of Internet access . C3 Index Getting Started vii hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001TOC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Contents viii Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 1 First-time setup Identify hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard external features included in most computer models. Computer hardware Component 1 HP Smart AC Adapter 3 Primary battery pack 2 Power cord 4 Modem cable Getting Started 11 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Top components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 Power light 2 Power button 3 Display switch 9 Num lock light

- Volume mute button q Volume mute light 4 Info Center button w Volume down button 5 Wireless button 6 Wireless light

= Volume up button r Internal microphone 7 Presentation button t Fingerprint reader 8 Caps lock light 12 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Component 1 Power light 2 Power button 3 Display switch 4 Wireless button 5 Wireless light 6 Caps lock light 7 Num lock light Getting Started 13 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Keys Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component 1 esc key 2 fn key 4 Windows applications key 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys 3 Windows logo key 6 Function keys 14 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Pointing devices TouchPad (select models only) Component 1 TouchPad 3 TouchPad scroll zone 2 Left TouchPad button 4 Right TouchPad button Getting Started 15 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Pointing stick (select models only) Component 1 Pointing stick 2 Left pointing stick button 3 Right pointing stick button 16 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Front components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light 4 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light 5 Display release latch 6 Speakers (2) 7 Digital Media Slot 8 Digital Media Slot light Getting Started 17 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light 4 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light 5 Display release latch 6 Speakers (2) 18 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Rear components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 Security cable slot 3 Parallel port 2 Power connector 4 S-Video-out jack Component 1 Security cable slot 2 Power connector Getting Started 19 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Right-side components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 USB ports (2) 2 1394 port 4 Optical drive 5 Optical drive button 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack 6 Serial port Component 1 1394 port 3 Optical drive 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack 4 Optical drive button 110 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Left-side components Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component 1 ExpressCard slot (select 6 USB ports (2) models only) 2 ExpressCard slot eject button 7 Audio-out (headphone) jack 3 RJ-45 (network) jack 8 Audio-in (microphone) jack 4 External monitor port 9 PC Card slot 5 Vent

- PC Card slot eject button Getting Started 111 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Bottom components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 Hard drive bay 5 Primary battery pack release 2 Expansion memory module and Mini Card compartment latches (2) 6 Battery bay 3 Accessory battery connector 7 Exhaust vents (4) 4 Docking connector 112 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Component 1 Hard drive bay 4 Primary battery pack release 2 Expansion memory module and Mini Card compartment latches (2) 5 Battery bay 3 Accessory battery connector 6 Exhaust vents (4) Getting Started 113 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Set up the computer CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and to ensure that the correct drivers are installed:

Do not set up the computer for the first time while the computer is docked in an optional docking device. During the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate standby or hibernation. Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations in this section. When setting up the computer, you will 1. Insert the battery pack into the computer so that it can begin to charge as soon as the computer is connected to external power. 2. Connect the computer to external power. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Set up the software. 5. Create recovery discs 114 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery pack To insert a primary battery pack:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery pack 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery pack release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. Getting Started 115 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. When the computer receives AC power, the battery pack begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) 4 is turned on. When the battery pack is fully charged, the battery light is turned off. 116 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup It is recommended that you leave the computer connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged and the battery light is turned off. (A partially charged new battery pack can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery pack has been fully charged.) Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. Getting Started 117 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 118 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup 3. Press the power button 1. The power light next to the power button 2 and the power light on the front of the computer 3 are turned on, and you are prompted to begin software setup. Getting Started 119 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through a brief software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, it is normal for some computer models to pause occasionally for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register your operating system and your computer, you must be connected to the Internet. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix C, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. If you do not send your registration during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. 120 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup Step 5: Create recovery discs HP highly recommends that you create recovery discs of your full factory image after you set up the computer for the first time. After you create the recovery discs, you can increase the amount of space on the hard drive by deleting the recovery partition. However, doing this is not recommended. HP Recovery CD/DVD Creator allows you to create a set of recovery discs for the computer. The recovery discs are used to boot up your computer and recover the operating system and software applications to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Note the following considerations before creating recovery discs:

You will need high quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media, purchased separately. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open HP Recovery CD/DVD Creator, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left off. Getting Started 121 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-409814-001 First-time setup To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (highly recommended). 4. Click Next. The Recovery CD/DVD Creator Wizard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to create the recovery discs. The wizard will specify the number of discs needed before disc creation begins. For information about backup and recovery, refer to Appendix B, Backup and Recovery. 122 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 2 Next steps Install additional hardware and software To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install any drivers required by the device. Install new software by inserting the software disc into the optical drive, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Protect the computer The information in this section is designed to protect the computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, or unsafe operation. Protect the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be updated. Getting Started 21 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer (select models only). For information about using the Norton Internet Security software, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search field in the Help and Support Center. Protect your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and Recovery for additional information. Protect your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to information about you, the computer, and your information. To optimize the privacy protection features included with the computer, it is recommended that you Keep your operating system and software updated. Many software applications contain security enhancements. For information about updating your operating system and software, refer to Update your software, later in this chapter. Use a firewall. A firewall is software that monitors incoming traffic on the computer. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. 22 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps Protect the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from computer or electronic retailers in some regions. Use the computer safely WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. Getting Started 23 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide (not available in all languages). It describes proper workstation setup; and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the computer on your lap for extended periods. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter or battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. 24 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps Connect to a computer network The computer may have one or more of the following networking devices:

Local area network (LAN) device Wireless local area network (WLAN) device Wireless wide-area network (WWAN) device Bluetooth device Internal modem If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, you must have a router or a wireless router. Refer to the documentation that came with the router for additional information, or refer to the Help and Support Center for information on networking. For information on connecting to a WWAN, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide that came with the computer. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to the Bluetooth Getting Started guide in the Help and Support Center. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet when you are not connected to a network, refer to Appendix C, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 25 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps Update your software Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. It is strongly recommended that you update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer:

Select Start > Help and Support. Locate the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other resources that provide information about using the computer are available through the Help and Support Center (select Start > Help and Support > User Guides), or on a User Guides disc included with some models. For more information about the resources available through the Help and Support Center, refer to Help and Support Center in Chapter 3, Troubleshooting. 26 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps Turn off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard Windows shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Shut down > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If the system is unresponsive and you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, use the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery pack. Getting Started 27 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Next steps 28 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, follow the troubleshooting steps below:

1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, next in this chapter. 2. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through the Help and Support Center. Select Start >

Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. 3. Contact Customer Care for any further assistance. Getting Started 31 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting Is the computer unable to start up?

To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light is turned on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The suggestions below may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, verify that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power:

Remove the primary battery pack and travel battery pack

(if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If the computer starts up, one of the battery packs may need to be replaced. If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery pack has reached a low-battery condition, which may prevent the computer from starting up. To start the computer and allow the battery to charge, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. 32 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Is the computer screen blank?

Troubleshooting If you have not turned off the computer but the screen is blank, the computer may be in standby or hibernation, may not be set to display the image on the computer screen, or the display switch may not be functioning properly. The suggestions below may help you determine why the computer screen is blank:

To resume from standby or restore from hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is in Microsoft Windows but is not in use, or when the computer has reached a low-battery condition. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneously displays on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to confirm that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 33 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Is software functioning abnormally?

If the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, Is the computer turned on, but is not responding?

Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on your computer, refer to Protect the computer from viruses in the Chapter 2, Next steps. 34 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Is the computer turned on, but is not responding?

If the computer is turned on, but is not responding to software applications or keyboard commands, try first to shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start >

Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If the computer remains unresponsive, try the emergency shutdown procedures in the following sequence:

1. If the computer is in Windows, press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. 2. If you cannot shut down the computer by using ctrl+alt+delete, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. 3. If you cannot shut down the computer by using the power button, unplug the computer from external power and remove the battery pack. If you cannot turn the computer back on after shutting it down, refer to Is the computer unable to start up?

Getting Started 35 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Is the computer unusually warm?

It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as a printer, or a soft surface, such as a pillow or a thick rug or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 36 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Is an external device not working?

Troubleshooting If an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices, such as monitors and printers, may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the Web site of the device manufacturer. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a CD included with the device or on the Web site of the device manufacturer. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Is the home wireless network connection not working?

If a home wireless network connection is not working as expected:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router (access point) is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable modem, and the lights are on. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, refer to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless. 38 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Help and Support Center If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access the Help and Support Center by selecting Start > Help and Support. In addition to providing information about your operating system, the Help and Support Center provides Information about your computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications. Answers to question about using your computer. Product information to help you learn to use computer and operating system features. Updates for your operating system, device drivers, and the software provided on your computer. Checkups for computer functionality. Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures. Links to community forums of IT experts. Getting Started 39 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting Customer Care If you are unable to find the help you need by using the Help and Support Center at Start > Help and Support, you may need to contact Customer Care. Preparing to contact Customer Care For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. 310 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > My Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). Contacting Customer Care by e-mail or telephone If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support to get help by e-mail or you can access Customer Care telephone numbers. Getting Started 311 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Troubleshooting 312 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/21/05 File: AppA.fm PN: HP-409814-001 A Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications of the computer. Operating Environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started A1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/21/05 File: AppA.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Specifications Rated Input Power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with your computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the computer be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power cord supplied by or approved for an HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. A2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 B Backup and Recovery The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. This chapter explains the available backup options. For information about recovering system functionality, refer to Recovering your system. HP installed drivers, utilities, and applications can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using the HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Safeguarding your data Software or devices added to the computer can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder. Getting Started B1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Backing up your system Using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can back up Specific files and folders. The entire system. Modifications since your last backup, using HP system recovery points. Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to discs. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup and Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect user system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up specific files and folders and then click Next. The Backup Wizard opens. 5. Click Back up selected files from most common locations

(Recommended). or Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access advanced filtering techniques. 6. Click Next. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up specific files or folders. B2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Backing up your entire system When you perform a complete system backup, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. The entire image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. For information on creating recovery discs, refer to Creating recovery discs. To back up your entire system:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect user system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Make a complete backup of my system, and then click Next. The Welcome to Full Image Manager page opens. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up your entire system. This process may take several minutes, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. Getting Started B3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Backing up modifications made to your system When you back up modifications made to your system, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then restore back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. By default, the first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that last recovery point. After you create a recovery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recovery points. You can schedule recovery points for a specific time or event in your system. B4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery To create and schedule a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect user system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up the modifications made on your system since your last recovery point or your first complete backup, and then click Next. The Recovery Point Manager opens. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to create or manage recovery points. Getting Started B5 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Recovering your system HP Backup and Recovery Manager analyzes your hard drive, creates a dedicated hard drive recovery partition on the hard drive, and stores a copy of the full factory image on that partition. You can choose to keep the copy on the recovery partition, or you can choose to store it on external recovery discs or on another drive. Before using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, try repairing the system by running Microsoft Windows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support, and then search for System Restore. The HP Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to Create recovery discs (highly recommended). The recovery discs are used to start your computer and to recover the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system failure or instability. For more information, refer to Creating recovery discs. Perform a recovery. HP Backup and Recovery Manager allows you to perform a full system recovery or to recover important files. This software works from a recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs that you create. For more information, refer to Performing a recovery. B6 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs of your full factory image after you set up the computer for the first time. After you create the recovery discs, you can increase the amount of space on the hard drive by deleting the recovery partition. However, doing this is not recommended. HP Recovery CD/DVD Creator allows you to create a set of recovery discs for the computer. The recovery discs are used to boot up your computer and recover the operating system and software applications to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Note the following considerations before creating recovery discs:

You will need high quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media, purchased separately. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open HP Recovery CD/DVD Creator, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left off. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (highly recommended). Getting Started B7 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery 4. Click Next. The Recovery CD/DVD Creator Wizard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to create the recovery discs. The wizard will specify the number of discs needed before disc creation begins. Performing a recovery Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs:

1. Back up all personal files. For more information, refer to Backing up specific files or folders. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a recovery from the recovery discs. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are two ways to perform a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Microsoft Windows. From the recovery partition. B8 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery Performing a recovery in Windows To perform a recovery in Windows:

1. Back up all personal files before performing a recovery. For more information, refer to Backing up specific files or folders. 2. If the computer is on, select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery Manager > HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Select a recovery option, and then click Next. If you select to recover the system, the computer restarts and recovery will begin. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a recovery in Windows. Performing a recovery from the recovery partition To perform a recovery from the recovery partition:

1. Back up all personal files before performing a recovery. For more information, refer to Backing up specific files or folders. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Select a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a recovery from the recovery partition. Getting Started B9 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Backup and Recovery B10 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 C Connect to the Internet from your home Your computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must Choose an Internet service provider (ISP). Choose the type of Internet access you want, and connect the hardware. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on your computer model and your location. Choose an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The New Connection Wizard helps you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started C1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard You can use the New Connection Wizard to connect to the Internet If you already have an account with an ISP. If you have a disc from an ISP. If you do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. If you have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address, and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard and instructions for using the wizard:

Select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. For more information about firewalls, refer to Protect your privacy in Chapter 2, Next steps. C2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Connect to the Internet from your home Choose the type of Internet access There are 3 basic types of Internet access:

Broadband: High-speed Internet access is available through Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services For broadband access, additional hardware and/or software must be provided by your ISP. Refer to Choose an ISP, or contact your ISP for details. Wireless: For high-speed mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. A wireless network set up at home requires a wireless router, purchased separately. To learn about setting up wireless access, select http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). Dial-up: You can access the Internet by dialing into a service provider using a modem cable connected to an RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started C3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Connect to the Internet from your home C4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Index Info Center 12 optical drive 110 PC Card slot eject 111 power 12, 13 Presentation mode 12 TouchPad 15 volume down 12 volume mute 12 volume up 12 wireless 12, 13 C cables modem 111 network 111 cables and cords, power 32 caps lock light, identifying 12, 13 compartments expansion memory module 112 expansion memory module and Mini Card 113 Mini Card 112 computer turn off 27 turn on 118 computer viruses 34 1394 port 110 A accessory battery connector, identifying 112, 113 altitude specifications A1 antivirus software 34 audio-in (microphone) jack 111 audio-out (headphone) jack 111 B battery bay 112, 113 battery light identifying 17, 18 on, off 116 battery pack charging 116 indentifying 11 inserting 115 battery pack release latch 112, 113 bays battery 112, 113 hard drive 112, 113 buttons ExpressCard slot eject 111 Getting Started Index1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Index connect the computer to external power 116 connecting to a computer network 25 connectors accessory battery 112, 113 docking 112 power 19 Customer Care 310 D D 17 data, safeguarding B1 devices, external, troubleshooting 37 Digital Media Slot light, identifying 17 Digital Media Slot, identifying 17 display release latch, identifying 17, 18 display switch, identifying 12, 13 display, switching image 33 docking connector 112 drive, optical 110 E eject button, PC Card slot 111 embedded numeric keypad keys, identifying 14 environmental specifications A1 esc key, identifying 14 exhaust vents 111 exhaust vents, identifying 112, 113 expansion memory module compartment, identifying 112 ExpressCard slot 111 ExpressCard slot eject button 111 external devices, troubleshooting 37 external monitor port 111 F fingerprint reader 12 firewalls 22 fn key, identifying 14 function keys, identifying 14 H hard drive bay, identifying 112, 113 headphone (audio-out) jack 111 Help and Support Center 39 hibernation 33 HP Smart AC Adapter identifying 11 humidity specifications A1 I IDE drive light, identifying 17, 18 IEC 60950 compliance 24 IEEE 1394 port 110 If 32 image, switching among display devices 33 Index2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Info Center button, identifying 12 insert the battery pack 115 internal microphone 12 Internet access C3 It 36 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 111 audio-out (headphone) 111 RJ-11 (modem) 110 RJ-45 (network) 111 S-Video-out 19 K keys embedded numeric keypad 14 esc 14 fn 14 function 14 Windows applications 14 Windows logo 14 L labels, service tag 310 LAN (local area network) 25 latches battery pack release 112, 113 display release 17, 18 lights battery 116 caps lock 12, 13 Index Digital Media Slot 17 IDE drive 17, 18 num lock 12, 13 power 12, 13, 17, 18, 119 wireless 12, 13, 17, 18 locate user guides 26 M memory module compartment, expansion 113 microphone (audio-in) jack 111 Mini Card compartment 113 Mini Card compartment, identifying 112 modem setting up Internet service C3 surge protection 23 modem cable 11, 111 monitor port, external 111 monitor, external 33, 37 N network (RJ-45) jack 111 network cable 111 network, connecting computer to 25 New Connection Wizard C2 num lock light, identifying 12, 13 O operating environment specifications A1 operating system Getting Started Index3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Index displaying version number 311 optical drive button, identifying 110 optical drive, identifying 110 overheating, computer 36 overheating, safety considerations 24 P parallel port, identifying 19 PC Card slot 111 PC Card slot eject button 111 pointing stick buttons 16 location 16 ports 1394 110 external monitor 111 parallel 19 serial 110 USB 110, 111 power running the computer on battery 117 turning on computer 119, 32 power button, identifying 12, 13 power connector, identifying 19 power cord identifying 11 power lights identifying 12, 13, 17, 18 on, off 119, 32 power surge 23 Presentation mode button, identifying 12 printer 37 Product Id 311 R rated input power, specifications A2 reader, fingerprint 12 recovery point B2 registration number, operating system 311 regulatory information notices 24 Regulatory, Safety, and Envi-

ronmental Notices 24 release latch battery pack 112, 113 reset (emergency shutdown) 35 RJ-11 (modem) jack 110 RJ-45 (network) jack 111 Run 34 S Safety and Comfort Guide 24 security cable slot, identifying 19 serial number, computer 310 serial port, identifying 110 Service Tag 310 service tag 310 set up the software 120 slots Digital Media 17 Index4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 ExpressCard 111 PC Card 111 security cable 19 software antivirus 21 software updates 26 speakers, identifying 17, 18 specifications operating environment A1 rated input power A2 standby 33 S-Video-out jack, identifying 19 switch, display 12, 13 system lock-up 35 T temperature safety considerations 24 specifications A1 troubleshooting 36 TouchPad buttons, identifying 15 TouchPad, identifying 15 traveling with computer, environmental specifications A2 troubleshooting display problems 33 external device problems 37 hibernation or standby problems 33 overheating problems 36 resources for 31 software problems 34 Index virus problems 34 wireless network problems 38 turn off the computer 27 turn on the computer 118 U update, software 26 USB ports, identifying 110, 111 user guides 26 V vents, exhaust 111, 112, 113 viruses, antivirus software 21 volume down button, identifying 12 volume mute button, identifying 12 volume up button, identifying 12 W Windows applications key, identifying 14 Windows logo key, identifying wireless button, identifying 14 12, 13 wireless light, identifying 12, 13, 17, 18 WLAN (wireless local area network) 25 WWAN (wireless wide-area network) 25 Getting Started Index5 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/29/05 File: 409814-001IX.fm PN: HP-409814-001 Index Index6 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL

397635-001.book Page i Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/22/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Title.fm HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Document Part Number: 397635-001 December 2005 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page ii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/22/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Title.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page ii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: 397635-001TOC.fm Contents Creating an HP Broadband Wireless Connection 4 Getting Help 7 hp CONFIDENTIAL ii 397635-001.book Page iii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: 397635-001TOC.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL iii 397635-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 File: Book.fm Welcome to HP Broadband Wireless Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer. Your new computer, when used with Verizon Wireless BroadbandAccess service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or across the country. Because everything you need is already installed on the computer, and you can easily sign up for Verizon Wireless BroadbandAccess service, you can quickly begin to experience the benefits of HP Broadband Wireless. hp CONFIDENTIAL 1 397635-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm Service for the HP Broadband Wireless computer is provided by Verizon Wireless. There are two types of service:

BroadbandAccess: BroadbandAccess is a fast, wide-area wireless Internet service, which allows you to quickly download complex files, and view and download e-mail attachments at broadband-like speeds, averaging between 300 to 500 Kbps, with bursts up to 2 Mbps. BroadbandAccess is available in many metropolitan areas across the United States. NationalAccess: NationalAccess is the Verizon Wireless national wireless Internet service. You can access the Internet and business applications, and view and download e-mail attachments at typical speeds averaging between 60 to 80 kbps, with bursts up to 144 kbps. NationalAccess is available in thousands of cities and towns, and many rural areas across the United States. hp CONFIDENTIAL 2 397635-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm You do not have to worry about the type of service area you are located in. A BroadbandAccess or NationalAccess connection will be created when you connect to the Verizon Wireless Network. The default connection will always be at the highest available speed. BroadbandAccess will be used whenever it is available, and your connection will automatically switch between BroadbandAccess and NationalAccess as you move between coverage areas. The Venturi compression application is available for use with the HP Broadband Wireless solution. Venturi is a wireless data optimization solution that can improve the way data is transmitted over the Verizon Wireless network and help to deliver faster mobile Internet file downloads. The Venturi client can be installed at: EDITORS NOTE - CAN THIS BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE START BUTTON?

3 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 Creating an HP Broadband Wireless Connection File: Book.fm To create an HP Broadband Wireless connection, you must run the VZAccess Manager application that is preinstalled on the computer. To access VZAccess Manager:

1. Select Start > VZAccess Manager. or Select Start > All Programs > VZAccess Manager. hp CONFIDENTIAL 4 397635-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm 2. In the VZAccess Manager window, click Connect. If you do not have a pre-existing account and you are in a BroadbandAccess coverage area, you will be directed to the Verizon QuickAccess page, where you can sign up for Verizon Wireless service. If you are not in a BroadbandAccess coverage area, a message displays, providing a toll-free number so you can call Verizon Wireless to activate an account. If you have already signed up for Verizon BroadbandAccess, you are connected to the Internet and can begin using the Internet immediately. You do not need to complete the following steps. 5 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm 3. On the QuickAccess page, choose the VZAccess plan you want to use, and follow the on-screen instructions. The following service plans are available:

Unlimited monthly access: Unlimited monthly access requires a 1- or 2-year contract. This is the recommended plan for most users, because it is the best value for those who regularly connect to the Internet. Unlimited daily access: No contract is required for the unlimited daily access. Users get 24 hours of service for a flat fee, and users can sign up for unlimited daily access as often as needed. This plan is recommended for those who will use BroadbandAccess infrequently. The information you provide is transmitted over a secure connection. In some cases, credit checks may require additional verification time. You can also review the customer agreement, coverage maps, and frequently asked questions. hp CONFIDENTIAL 6 397635-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm 4. After establishing your Verizon Wireless account, follow the on-screen instructions to connect to the Internet. 5. To end your Internet connection, click Disconnect in VZAccess Manager. After your Verizon Wireless account is established, you can manage the account online, including checking balances and making payments. Getting Help For additional information and technical support for VZAccess Manager and Verizon wireless devices:

Refer to the Verizon Wireless VZAccess Manager Quick Reference Guide that came with the computer. Refer to the VZAccess Manager online help. Access Frequently Asked Questions on the Verizon Wireless QuickAccess page. 7 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL 8 397635-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Notice-Back.fm Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC. VZACCESS and Quick 2 Net are service marks of Verizon Wireless. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition December 2005 397635-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL

DRAFT Revised: 9/30/05 File: Title.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Notebook Tour Document Part Number: 404161-001 March 2006 This guide explains the computer hardware features. hp CONFIDENTIAL September 30, 2005 1:36 pm DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001TOC.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Contents 1 Components Top components . 12 Lights . 12 Pointing devices. 16 Buttons, switches, and readers. 18 Keys . 111 Hotkey quick reference . 112 Front components. 113 Rear components . 115 Right-side components. 117 Left-side components . 119 Bottom components . 121 WLAN antennae (select models only) . 126 WWAN antennae (select models only) . 127 Additional hardware components . 128 Labels . 129 2 Specifications Operating environment. 21 Rated input power . 22 Index Notebook Tour ii hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001TOC.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Contents iii Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 1 Components This chapter explains the hardware features of the computer. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. Components included with the computer may by region and by model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard external features included in most computer models. Notebook Tour 11 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Top components Lights Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 Power lights* (2) Description Green: The computer is on. Blinking green: The computer is in standby. Blinking green rapidly: An HP Smart AC Adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation. 12 hp CONFIDENTIAL

(Continued) Notebook Tour DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Component 2 Wireless lights (2) 3 Caps lock light 4 Num lock light Components Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network

(LAN) device, wireless wide-area network (WAN), and/or a Bluetooth device is turned on. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. 5 Volume mute light On: System sound is turned off. 6 Battery light Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking more quickly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 7 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*There are 2 power lights. Both display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open; the other power light is always visible on the front of the computer. There are 2 wireless lights. Both display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open; the other wireless light is always visible on the front of the computer. Notebook Tour 13 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component 1 Power lights* (2) 2 Wireless lights (2) Description Green: The computer is on. Blinking green: The computer is in standby. Blinking green rapidly: An HP Smart AC Adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network

(LAN) device, wireless wide-area network (WAN), and/or a Bluetooth device is turned on. 3 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 14 hp CONFIDENTIAL

(Continued) Notebook Tour DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Component 4 Num lock light 5 Battery light Components Description On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking more quickly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 6 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*There are 2 power lights. Both display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open; the other power light is always visible on the front of the computer. There are 2 wireless lights. Both display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open; the other wireless light is always visible on the front of the computer. Notebook Tour 15 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Pointing devices TouchPad (select models only) Component 1 TouchPad 2 Left TouchPad button Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. 3 TouchPad scroll zone Scrolls up or down. 4 Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 16 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Pointing stick (select models only) Components Component 1 Pointing stick 2 Left pointing stick button 3 Right pointing stick button Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Notebook Tour 17 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Buttons, switches, and readers Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. 18 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Component 1 Power button*

2 Display switch 3 Info Center button 4 Wireless button Components Description When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. In standby, briefly press to exit standby. In hibernation, briefly press to exit hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Initiates standby if the display is closed while the computer is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open the following software solutions: Altiris Local Recovery, Contact HP, Help and Support, Accessories Product Tour (Options Demo), ProtectTools Security Manager, Software Setup, System Information, and Wireless Assistant. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 Presentation button Starts the Presentation feature. 6 Volume mute button Mutes system sound. 7 Volume down button Decreases system volume. 8 Volume up button Increases system volume. 9 Internal microphone Records sound.

- Fingerprint reader Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows instead of a password logon. Notebook Tour 19 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component 1 Power button*

2 Display switch 3 Wireless button Description When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. In standby, briefly press to exit standby. In hibernation, briefly press to exit hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Initiates standby if the display is closed while the computer is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 110 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Keys Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component 1 esc key 2 fn key 3 Windows logo key 4 Windows applications key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer.

(Continued) Notebook Tour 111 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys 6 Function keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Refer to the table in Hotkey quick reference for a description of each hotkey. Hotkey quick reference To perform this function Initiate standby Resume from standby Alternate between computer display and external display Display battery information Clear battery information Decrease screen brightness Increase screen brightness Display system information Clear system information Press fn+f3 Power button fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+esc fn+esc or press OK 112 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Front components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description 1 Display release latch Opens the notebook. 2 Speakers (2) Produce system sound. 3 Digital Media Slot Supports 7 optional digital card formats: SD (Secure Digital) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro, Memory Stick Duo, SmartMedia card, and xD-Picture Card. 4 Digital Media Slot light On: A digital card is being accessed. Notebook Tour 113 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 1 Display release latch Opens the notebook. 2 Speakers (2) Produce system sound. 114 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Rear components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 3 Parallel port 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional printer. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. Notebook Tour 115 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 116 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Right-side components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component 1 USB ports (2) 2 1394 port Description Connect optional USB devices. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 device, such as a camcorder. 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. 4 Optical drive Reads an optical disc. 5 Optical drive button Releases the media tray. 6 Serial port Connects an optional serial device. Notebook Tour 117 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component 1 1394 port Description Connects an optional IEEE 1394 device, such as a camcorder. 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. 3 Optical drive Reads an optical disc. 4 Optical drive button Releases the media tray. 118 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Left-side components Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description 1 ExpressCard slot (select models only) Supports optional ExpressCard/54 or ExpressCard/34 cards. 2 ExpressCard slot eject button Ejects the ExpressCard from the ExpressCard slot. 3 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 4 External monitor port Connects an external monitor.

(Continued) Notebook Tour 119 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component 5 Vent Description Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 6 USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. 7 Audio-out (headphone) jack 8 Audio-in (microphone) jack 9 PC Card slot Produces system stereo sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional headset microphone or a monaural microphone. Supports optional Type I, Type II, or Type III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. Some models may be shipped with a smart card reader in the bottom card slot.

- PC Card slot eject button Eject the PC Card from the PC Card slot. 120 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Bottom components Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Notebook Tour 121 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 1 Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 2 Expansion memory module and Mini Card compartment Contains the expansion memory module slot and a wireless LAN device. To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card device authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. To contact Customer Care, click Contact a Technician in the Help and Support Center. 3 Travel battery connector Connects an optional travel battery. 4 Docking connector 5 Primary battery pack release latches (2) 6 Battery bay Connects the computer to an optional docking device. Release the primary battery pack from the battery bay. Holds the primary battery pack.

(Continued) 122 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component 7 Vents (4)*

Description Provide airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

*Depending on your computer model, the vents on the computer may vary in number and location. Notebook Tour 123 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 1 Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 2 Expansion memory module and Mini Card compartment Contains the expansion memory module slot and a wireless LAN device. To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card device authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. To contact Customer Care, click Contact a Technician in the Help and Support Center. 124 hp CONFIDENTIAL

(Continued) Notebook Tour DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Component Description 3 Travel battery connector Connects an optional travel battery. 4 Primary battery pack release latches (2) 5 Battery bay 6 Vents (4)*

Release the primary battery pack from the battery bay. Holds the primary battery pack. Provide airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

*Depending on your computer model, the vents on the computer may vary in number and location. Notebook Tour 125 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components WLAN antennae (select models only) Two wireless antennae inside the display enclosure send and receive wireless device signals over wireless local area networks

(WLANs). These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 126 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components WWAN antennae (select models only) Two wireless antennae inside the display enclosure allow you to connect to a wireless wide-area network (WWAN), and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless module and service from a supported cellular network operator. For more information on HP Broadband Wireless and how to sign up for service, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide that shipped with your computer. Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Notebook Tour 127 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Additional hardware components Component 1 AC adapter 2 Power cord*

3 Battery pack*

4 Modem cable*

Description Converts AC power to DC power. Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects an internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter.

*Modem cables, battery packs, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 128 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Labels Components The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product name, product number

(P/N), and serial number (S/N) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Notebook Tour 129 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Components Wireless certification labelsProvides information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network

(WLAN) device, a wireless wide-area network (WWAN) device, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one certification label per wireless device is included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The WLAN and Bluetooth wireless certification labels are located inside the expansion memory module compartment. The WWAN certification label is located inside the battery compartment. 130 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 10/19/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-404161-001 2 Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications of the computer. Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. Notebook Tour 21 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 10/19/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with your computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the computer be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power cord supplied by or approved for an HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 22 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index optical drive 117, 118 PC Card slot eject 120 power 19, 110 Presentation 19 TouchPad 16 volume 19 wireless 19, 110 C cables modem 119 network 119 RJ-11 (modem) 128 caps lock light 13, 14 Certificate of Authenticity label 129 compartments expansion memory module and Mini Card 122, 124 components bottom 121 front 113 left-side 119 rear 115 right-side 117 top 12 connectors 1394 port 117, 118 A AC adapter, identifying 128 altitude specifications 21 antennae 126, 127 applications key, Windows 111 audio-in (microphone) jack 120 audio-out (headphone) jack 120 B battery bay 122, 125, 129 battery light, identifying 13, 15 battery pack release latch 122, 125 battery pack, identifying 128 bays battery 122, 125, 129 hard drive 122, 124 Bluetooth label 130 buttons ExpressCard slot eject 119 Info Center 19 mute 19 Notebook Tour Index1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index docking 122 power 115, 116 travel battery 122, 125 cord, power, identifying 128 D digital cards 113 Digital Media Slot light 113 Digital Media Slot, location 113 display release latch 113, display switch, identifying 114 19, 110 docking connector 122 drives, optical 117, 118 E eject button, PC Card slot 120 environmental specifications 21 ExpressCard slot 119 ExpressCard slot eject button 119 external monitor port 119 F fingerprint reader 19 fn key 111 function keys 112 H hard drive bay, identifying 122, 124 headphone (audio-out) jack 120 hotkeys, Quick Reference 112 HP Smart AC Adapter, identifying 128 humidity specifications 21 I IDE drive light 13, 15 IEEE 1394 port 117, 118 Info Center button 19 internal microphone 19 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 120 audio-out (headphone) 120 RJ-11 (modem) 117, 118 RJ-45 (network) 119 S-Video-out 115 K keypad keys 112 keys esc 111 fn 111 function 112 keypad 112 Windows applications 111 Windows logo 111 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 129 modem approval 129 regulatory 129 service tag 129 Index2 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index wireless certification 130 WLAN 130 latches battery pack release 122, 125 display release 113, 114 lights battery 13, 15 caps lock 13, 14 Digital Media Slot 113 IDE drive 13, 15 mute 13 num lock 13, 15 power 12, 14 wireless 13, 14 lock, security cable 115, 116 M memory module compartment, expansion 122, 124 Memory Stick 113 Memory Stick Duo 113 Memory Stick Pro 113 microphone (audio-in) jack 120 microphone, internal 19 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 129 Mini Card compartment 122, 124 modem approval label 129 modem cable 119 monitor port, external 119 MultiMediaCard 113 mute button 19 mute light 13 N network (RJ-45) jack 119 network cable 119 num lock light 13, 15 O operating environment specifications 21 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 129 Product Key 129 optical drive button 117, 118 optical drive, identifying 117, 118 P parallel port 115 PC Card slot 120 PC Card slot eject button 120 pointing stick buttons 17 location 17 ports 1394 117, 118 external monitor 119 parallel 115 serial 117 USB 117, 120 power button 19, 110 power connector 115, 116 power cord 128 power light 12, 14 Presentation button 19 Notebook Tour Index3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index Product Key 129 product name and number, computer 129 R rated input power specifications 22 regulatory information modem approval label 129 regulatory label 129 wireless certification labels 130 release latch battery pack 122, 125 display 113, 114 RJ-11 (modem) cable 128 RJ-11 (modem) jack 117, 118 RJ-45 (network) jack 119 S scrolling regions, TouchPad 16 Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card 113 security cable slot 115, 116 serial number, computer 129 serial port 117 service tag 129 slots Digital Media 113 ExpressCard 119 memory 122, 124 PC Card 120 security cable 115, 116 SmartMedia (SM) card 113 speakers 113, 114 specifications operating environment 21 rated input power 22 S-Video-out jack 115 switches display 19, 110 identifying 19, 110 T temperature specifications 21 TouchPad 16 travel battery connector 122, 125 traveling with computer environmental specifications 22 modem approval label 129 wireless certification labels 130 U USB ports, identifying 117, 120 V vents 120, 123, 125 volume buttons 19 W Windows applications key 111 Windows logo key 111 wireless antennae 126, 127 wireless button 19, 110 wireless certification label 130 Index4 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index wireless light 13, 14 WLAN label 130 WWAN label 130 X xD-Picture Card 113 Notebook Tour Index5 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 11/9/05 File: 404161-001IX.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Index Index6 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 9/30/05 File: Notice-Back.fm PN: HP-404161-001 Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Notebook Tour First Edition March 2006 Document Part Number: 404161-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL September 30, 2005 1:36 pm DRAFT Revised: 9/30/05 File: Notice-Back.fm PN: HP-404161-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL September 30, 2005 1:36 pm

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Document Part Number: 384459-005 January 2006 Contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 12 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . 13 Products with wireless LAN devices. 14 Brazilian notices. 15 Wireless LAN certification markings . 15 Canadian notices . 16 Avis Canadien . 16 European Union notices . 17 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 18 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 19 Ergonomics notice . 19 Indian notice. 19 Japanese notices . 110 Wireless LAN 802.11b device. 110 Wireless LAN 802.11g device. 111 Wireless LAN certification markings . 111 Bluetooth device . 114 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices . 114 Korean notice . 115 Taiwan notice . 115 Airline travel notice . 116 Battery notices . 116 Energy Star compliance . 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices ii Contents Laser safety notices . 117 CDRH regulations . 117 Laser information . 118 Modem notices . 119 Telecommunications device approvals . 120 U.S. modem statements . 120 U.S. modem declarations. 123 Canadian modem statements . 125 Japanese modem statements . 125 New Zealand modem statements. 126 Power cord notice. 128 Japanese power cord notice . 128 Macrovision Corporation notice . 129 2 Safety notices Travel notice. 21 Battery notices . 21 Power cord notices . 22 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal . 31 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union . 32 United States mercury disposal . 32 Index iii Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some notices may not apply. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Click the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 11 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 12 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify the product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 13 Regulatory notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 14 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Brazilian notices Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

-

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 15 Regulatory notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access would damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz bands, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725-5825 MHz band, the maximum gain permitted to comply with the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation is noted below:

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 16 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices European Union notices Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 17 Regulatory notices The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 18 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice German Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 19 Regulatory notices Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b device 2. 4DS 4 110 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Wireless LAN 802.11g device 2. 4OF 4 Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 111 Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

112 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 113 Regulatory notices Bluetooth device 2 . 4 F H 1 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

114 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Korean notice Taiwan notice Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 115 Regulatory notices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to the user guide included with the product. Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 116 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Laser safety notices All systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products effective August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976, onward. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 117 Regulatory notices Laser information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly and module-level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. 118 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Modem notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 119 Regulatory notices Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 120 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call Customer Care. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 121 Regulatory notices Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 122 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 123 Regulatory notices 124 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 125 Regulatory notices The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. 126 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications. a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 127 Regulatory notices Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your service partner. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice 128 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 129 Regulatory notices 130 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 2 Safety notices Travel notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Battery notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING: Keep the battery pack away from children. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 21 Safety notices Power cord notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 22 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some notices may not apply. Battery disposal N WARNING: When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack disposal. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 31 Environmental notices Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. 32 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index equipment 32 mercury 32 E Energy Star compliance 116 environmental notices 31 equipment disposal notice 32 ergonomics notice 19 European Union notices 17 F Federal Communications Commission cables 12 modifications 12 notice 12 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 G Germany, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 H hardware device, identifying 11 I Indian notice 19 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 5-GHz wireless LAN devices 19 A airline travel notice 116 B battery disposal notice 31 battery notice 116, 21 Brazilian notice 15 C cables, Federal Communications Commission 12 Canadian modem statement 125 Canadian notices 16 Center for Devices and Radiological Health 117 D Declaration of Conformity 13 devices hardware, identifying 11 wireless LAN 14 disposal notices battery 31 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index1 Index Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 18 J Japanese modem statement 125 Japanese notice 110 Japanese power cord notice 128 K Korean notice 115 L laser information 118 laser safety notice 117 M Macrovision Corporation notice 129 mercury disposal notice 32 modem notices 119 modem statements Canadian 125 Japanese 125 New Zealand 126 U.S. 120 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 12 N New Zealand modem statement 126 notices airline travel 116 battery 116, 21, 31 Brazilian 15 Canadian 16 environmental 31 equipment disposal 32 ergonomics 19 European Union 17 Federal Communications Commission 12 Indian 19 Japanese 110 Japanese power cord 128 Korean 115 laser safety 117 Macrovision Corporation 129 mercury disposal 32 modem 119 power cords 128, 22 Taiwan 115 travel 21 P power cord notice 128, 22 T Taiwan notice 115 telecommunications device approvals 120 travel notice 21 U U.S. modem statement 120 V voice support 128 W wireless LAN devices 14 Index2 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Fifth Edition January 2006 First Edition May 2005 Document Part Number: 384459-005

416484-002.book Page i Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/25/07 File: Title.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installation Guide HP Broadband Wireless Module Document Part Number: 416484-002 August 2007 hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page ii Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/20/07 File: Notice-Front.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide HP Broadband Wireless Module Second Edition: August 2007 First Edition: ??????

Document Part Number: 416484-002 hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page iii Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: 416484-002TOC.fm Contents Contents 1 Getting started Using HP Broadband Wireless. 11 Identifying the required hardware . 12 Preparing the computer . 14 2 Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Installing the wireless module in model nc6400 and model 6910p . 21 Removing the keyboard. 22 Installing the wireless module . 25 Replacing the keyboard . 29 Installing the wireless module in model 2510p . 210 Installing the wireless module in model 2710p . 215 3 Completing the installation 4 Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module Removing a wireless module from model nc6400 and model 6910p . 41 Removing a wireless module from model 2510p . 44 Removing a wireless module from model 2710p . 46 5 Installing the HP Broadband Wireless HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL iii 416484-002.book Page iv Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: 416484-002TOC.fm Contents Module software 6 Downloading updates A Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice . A1 Modifications . A2 Cables. A2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) . A2 Products with wireless devices. A4

. A4

. A4 Index iv HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap1.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Getting started 1 Getting started When used with mobile network operator service, your HP Broadband Wireless computer gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network when you are on the road and outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. Using HP Broadband Wireless To use the mobile broadband capability of your HP Broadband Wireless computer, you must do the following:

1. Purchase mobile network operator service from a CMDA provider for your HP Broadband Wireless computer. The coverage area of each mobile network operator is different. For information on coverage and how to establish service, see the HP Web site:

http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 11 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap1.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Getting started 2. Locate the slot for the HP Broadband Wireless Module. Refer to the following table to determine the locations for your computer. Computer model Wireless module slot nc6400 6910p 2510p 2710p Under the keyboard Under the keyboard WWAN* module compartment Hard drive bay

*wireless wide area network (WWAN) 3. Install the HP Broadband Wireless Module in your HP Broadband Wireless computer. Instructions for installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module are provided in Chapter 2, Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module. 4. Install the HP Broadband Wireless Module software on your computer. The software is included on the HP Broadband Wireless Software disc in the HP Broadband Wireless Module kit. Instructions are provided in Chapter 5, Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module software. Identifying the required hardware CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, install only an HP Broadband Wireless Module authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you install a wireless module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality. Then contact technical support. For information about contacting technical support, refer to the printed Getting Started guide included with your computer. 12 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 3 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap1.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Getting started To install the HP Broadband Wireless Module, you need the items shown in the following illustration and described in the following table. Item Component 1 2 3 4 HP Broadband Wireless Module Two screws Phillips screwdriver Serial number and regulatory label Not illustrated HP Broadband Wireless Module Software disc Not included Flat-bladed or T8 Torx screwdriver (if keyboard removal is required) HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 13 416484-002.book Page 4 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap1.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Getting started Preparing the computer Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all programs, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery. 14 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 2 Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Installing the wireless module in model nc6400 and model 6910p In the following computer models, the slot for the wireless module is located under the keyboard:

HP Compaq nc6400 Notebook PC HP Compaq 6910p Notebook PC Follow the procedure below to install the HP Broadband Wireless Module under the keyboard:

HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 21 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Removing the keyboard CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. To remove the keyboard:

1. Follow the procedures in Preparing the computer, in Chapter 1, Getting started. 2. Turn the computer upside down. If your computer has a wireless module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to Chapter 4, Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module. After you remove the existing module, begin the following procedure at step 3 to install the new module. 22 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 3 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 3. Use a small, flat-bladed or T8 Torx screwdriver to remove the 3 keyboard screws from the bottom of the computer. 4. Turn the computer right-side up and open it. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 23 416484-002.book Page 4 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module CAUTION: The keyboard is attached to the computer with a cable. You may leave the cable connected while you install the wireless module. Be careful that you do not damage the cable or connectors when you remove and replace the keyboard. 5. Unlock the keyboard 1 by sliding the 4 keyboard latches 2 in the direction shown. Then lift the rear edge of the keyboard and gently swing it forward until the keyboard rests upside down on the palm rest. 24 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 5 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Installing the wireless module If your computer has a wireless module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to Chapter 4, Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module. After you remove the existing module, begin the following procedure at step 3 to install the new module. 1. Remove the tape 1 securing the antenna cables. 2. Gently remove the plastic cover 2 from the MAIN antenna cable (labeled with the number 5 or with a red band) and from the AUX antenna cable (labeled with the number 6 or with a blue band). HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 25 416484-002.book Page 6 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 3. Insert the notched edge of the wireless module at an angle into the WWAN module slot 1, and then press the module 2 down until it is seated. 4. Use the Phillips screwdriver and the 2 screws 3 provided in this kit to secure the module in place. CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the wireless module to function improperly. 26 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 7 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module CAUTION: To avoid damaging the antenna connector, do not insert the connector at an angle. Instead, firmly press it straight down until it snaps into place. 5. Route the MAIN antenna cable 1 (labeled with the number 5 or with a red band) as shown in the illustration, and then connect it to the MAIN terminal 2 on the wireless module. Be sure that the antenna cable is routed through the channel in the frame of the computer so that it does not obstruct the SIM detect switch 3 or lie across the raised edge of the frame. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 27 416484-002.book Page 8 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 6. Route the AUX antenna cable 1 (labeled with the number 6 or with a blue band) as shown in the illustration, and then connect it to the AUX terminal 2 on the wireless module. Be sure that the antenna cable is routed through the channel in the frame of the computer and so that it does not obstruct the SIM detect switch 3 or lie across the raised edge of the frame. 28 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 9 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Replacing the keyboard CAUTION: Be sure that the WWAN antenna cables are carefully positioned and that neither cable is obstructing the SIM detect switch or lying across the raised edge of the frame of the computer. See steps 5 and 6 on pages 2-7 and 2-8 for details. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. Doing so could reduce wireless performance or cause the wireless module to function improperly. 1. Rotate the keyboard back to its original location 1 and lock it into place by sliding the 4 keyboard latches in the direction shown 2. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 29 416484-002.book Page 10 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 2. Close the computer and turn it upside down. Use a small, flat-bladed or T8 Torx screwdriver to replace the 3 keyboard screws on the bottom of the computer. Installing the wireless module in model 2510p In the HP Compaq 2510p Notebook PC, the slot for the wireless module is located in the WWAN module compartment on the bottom of the computer. Follow the procedure below to install an HP Broadband Wireless Module in the WWAN module compartment:

1. Follow the procedures in Preparing the computer, in Chapter 1, Getting started. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the front toward you. 210 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 11 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 3. Use the Phillips screwdriver provided in this kit to loosen the WWAN module compartment cover screw 1. 4. Lift the WWAN module compartment cover away from the computer 2. If your computer has a wireless module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to Chapter 4, Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module. After you remove the existing module, resume this procedure at step 7 to install the new module. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 211 416484-002.book Page 12 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 5. Remove the tape 1 securing the antenna cables. 6. Gently remove the plastic cover 2 from the MAIN antenna cable (labeled with the number 5 or with a red band) and from the AUX antenna cable (labeled with the number 6 or with a blue band). 212 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 13 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 7. Insert the notched edge of the wireless module at an angle into the WWAN module slot 1, and then press the module 2 down until it is seated. 8. Use the Phillips screwdriver and the 2 screws 3 provided in this kit to secure the module in place. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 213 416484-002.book Page 14 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 9. Connect the AUX antenna cable 1 (labeled with the number 6) to the AUX terminal on the wireless module and connect the MAIN antenna cable 2 (labeled with the number 5) to the MAIN terminal. 214 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 15 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module Installing the wireless module in model 2710p In the HP Compaq 2710p Notebook PC, the slot for the wireless module is located in the hard drive bay on the bottom of the computer. Follow the procedure below to install an HP Broadband Wireless Module in the hard drive bay:

1. Follow the procedures in Preparing the computer, in Chapter 1, Getting started. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the back toward you. 3. Use the Phillips screwdriver provided in this kit to loosen the 6 hard drive cover screws 1. 4. Lift the hard drive bay cover 2 away from the computer. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 215 416484-002.book Page 16 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module CAUTION: Do not pull on an antenna cable to remove it. Gently grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 5. Carefully disconnect the 2 wireless local area network

(WLAN) module antenna cables (labeled with the numbers 1 and 2) by lifting the cable connector(s) with your fingernails or a small screwdriver. If your computer has a wireless module currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new module. Refer to Chapter 4, Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module. After you remove the existing module, resume this procedure at step 8 to install the new module. 216 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 17 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 6. Remove the tape 1 securing the broadband wireless module antenna cables. 7. Gently remove the plastic cover 2 from the MAIN antenna cable (labeled with the number 5 or with a red band) and from the AUX antenna cable (labeled with the number 6 or with a blue band). HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 217 416484-002.book Page 18 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 8. Insert the notched edge of the wireless module at an angle into the WWAN module slot 1, and then press the module 2 down until it is seated. 9. Use the Phillips screwdriver and the 2 screws 3 provided in this kit to secure the module in place. 218 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 19 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 10. Connect the MAIN antenna cable 1 (labeled with the number 5) to the MAIN terminal on the wireless module and connect the AUX antenna cable 2 (labeled with the number 6) to the AUX terminal on the wireless module. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 219 416484-002.book Page 20 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap2.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module 11. Reconnect the 2 WLAN module antenna cables 1 (labeled with the numbers 1 and 2). 220 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap3.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Completing the installation 3 Completing the installation 1. Remove the paper covering the adhesive on the back of the serial number and regulatory label and affix the label inside the battery compartment. Be sure that the label adheres securely. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 31 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap3.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Completing the installation 2. Replace the battery 1, secure the battery lock 2, and turn the computer right-side up. Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For more detailed information about replacing the battery, refer to the user guides on your computer. To access the guides in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. 3. Reconnect all external devices. 4. Connect the computer to external AC power:

a. Plug the AC adapter into the computer. b. Plug one end of the power cord into the AC adapter and the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet. 5. Turn on the computer. 32 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module 4 Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module If you have a problem removing the module, contact your network administrator or an authorized service provider for assistance. Removing a wireless module from model nc6400 and model 6910p In models nc6400 and 6910p, the slot for the wireless module is located under the keyboard. Follow the procedure below to remove an HP Broadband wireless module from under the keyboard:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 41 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module CAUTION: Do not pull on an antenna cable to remove it. Gently grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 1. Carefully disconnect the wireless module antenna cables from the wireless module by lifting the cable connectors with your fingernails or a small screwdriver. 42 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 3 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2 screws 1. 3. Lift up the wireless module 2, and slide it out of the slot 3 at an angle. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 43 416484-002.book Page 4 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module Removing a wireless module from model 2510p In model 2510p, the slot for the wireless module is located in the WWAN module compartment on the bottom of the computer. Follow the procedure below to remove an HP Broadband Wireless Module from the WWAN module compartment:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. 44 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 5 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module CAUTION: Do not pull on an antenna cable to remove it. Gently grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 1. Carefully disconnect the wireless module antenna cables 1 from the wireless module by lifting the cable connectors with your fingernails or a small screwdriver. 2. Remove the 2 Phillips screws 2 that secure the wireless module to the computer. (The edge of the module opposite the slot rises away from the computer.) 3. Slide the wireless module away from the slot 3 at an angle 4. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 45 416484-002.book Page 6 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module Removing a wireless module from model 2710p In model 2710p, the slot for the wireless module is located in the hard drive bay on the bottom of the computer. Follow the procedure below to remove an HP Broadband Wireless Module from the hard drive bay:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object before you begin the following procedure. CAUTION: Do not pull on an antenna cable to remove it. Gently grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage the connector or break it off the cable. 46 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 7 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module 1. Carefully disconnect the wireless module antenna cables 1 from the wireless module by lifting the cable connectors with your fingernails or a small screwdriver. 2. Remove the 2 Phillips screws 2 that secure the wireless module to the computer. (The edge of the module opposite the slot rises away from the computer.) 3. Gently pull the wireless module away from the slot 3 at an angle 4. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 47 416484-002.book Page 8 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap4.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module 48 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap5.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module software 5 Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module software The installation disc included in this accessory kit contains the necessary software and drivers for the wireless module. To install the software and drivers:

Insert the HP Broadband Wireless Module Software disc into the optical drive of the computer and follow the on-screen instructions. Updates to the software and drivers contained on the disc may be available. For instructions on downloading and installing the updated software and drivers, refer to Chapter 6, Downloading updates. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 51 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap5.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Installing the HP Broadband Wireless Module software 52 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap6.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Downloading updates 6 Downloading updates HP periodically updates the software and drivers for the wireless module. You can download and install software and driver updates from the HP Web site to your hard drive. The updates are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. To obtain software updates:

1. See the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to select your country or region. 2. Click Download drivers and software (and firmware), and then enter the product name for your computer. 3. Select your operating system. 4. Select Driver - Network, and then select the upgrade, if available, for the HP Broadband Wireless Module software and drivers. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the software and drivers to your hard drive. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 61 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: Chap6.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Downloading updates 62 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: AppA.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Regulatory notices A Regulatory notices This section provides compliance information and country-specific wireless regulatory notices for the computer product. Some notices may not apply to your product. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL A1 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: AppA.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Regulatory notices Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 A2 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 3 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: AppA.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Regulatory notices For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL A3 416484-002.book Page 4 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: AppA.fm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number Regulatory notices Products with wireless devices This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour guide included with the computer. A4 HP Broadband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL 416484-002.book Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: 416484-002IX.fm Index updating 61 I installing driver updates 61 wireless module software 51 installing an HP Broadband Wireless Module model 2510p 210 model 2710p 215 model 6910p 21 model nc6400 21 K keyboard removing 22 replacing 29 M mobile network operators 11 P preparing the computer 14 R regulatory label 31 removing an HP Broadband Wireless Module model 2510p 44 B broadband wireless coverage area 11 regulatory notices A1 D Declaration of Conformity A2 downloading software updates from HP 61 drivers downloading 61 updating 61 E equipment usage regulatory notices A1 establishing service 11 F Federal Communications Commission (FCC) cable notice A2 device modifications notice A2 equipment usage notice A1 firmware downloading 61 HP Boradband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL Index1 416484-002.book Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2007 4:08 PM PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-416484-002 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 6/27/07 File: 416484-002IX.fm Index model 2710p 46 model 6410p 41 model nc6400 41 removing the keyboard 22 replacing the keyboard 29 required hardware 13 S Specific Absorption Rate

(SAR) information A4 U updating drivers 61 updating firmware 61 W wireless coverage area 11 regulatory notices A1 wireless module antenna cable disconnecting 42, 45, 47 wireless module software installation 51 WLAN antenna cable disconnecting 216 Index2 HP Boradband Wireless Module Installation Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL